راهنمای محصول

ManualsBrandsSamsung ManualsCamcordersVP-DX100

VP-DX100(i)

VP-DX100H

VP-DX102

VP-DX103(i)

VP-DX104

VP-DX105(i)

DVD ﻲﻳﻮﻳﺪﻳﻭ ﻦﻴﺑﺭﻭﺩ

ﺮﺑﺭﺎﻛ ﻱﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ

ﺎﻫ ﺖﻴﻠﺑﺎﻗ ﻢﺴﺠﺗ

.ﻢﻳﺭﺍﺰﮕﺳﺎﭙﺳ ﺎﻤﺷ ﺯﺍ ﺪﻳﺍ ﻩﺩﻮﻤﻧ ﻱﺭﺍﺪﻳﺮﺧ ﺍﺭ Samsung ﻝﻮﺼﺤﻣ ﻦﻳﺍ ﻪﻜﻨﻳﺍ ﺯﺍ

ﺭﺩ ﺍﺭ ﺩﻮﺧ ﻝﻮﺼﺤﻣ

ﺎﻔﻄﻟ ،ﺮﺗ ﻞﻣﺎﻛ ﺕﺎﻣﺪﺧ ﺖﻓﺎﻳﺭﺩ ﻱﺍﺮﺑ

ﺪﻴﻳﺎﻤﻧ ﺖﺒﺛ ﻲﻧﺎﺸﻧ ﻦﻳﺍ

www.samsung.com/global/register

(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.indb 1 2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:03

Summary of content (121 pages)

PAGE 1
‫)‪VP-DX100(i‬‬ ‫‪VP-DX100H‬‬ ‫‪VP-DX102‬‬ ‫)‪VP-DX103(i‬‬ ‫‪VP-DX104‬‬ ‫)‪VP-DX105(i‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺴﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ‪ Samsung‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﭙﺎﺳﮕﺰﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪www.samsung.com/global/register‬‬ ‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:03‬‬ ‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.
PAGE 2
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ ٣ ١\٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ DVD-VIDEO‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ٣ ١/٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ )‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﻱ( ‪) DVD-RW/+RW/-R/+R DL‬ﺩﻭﻻﻳﻪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ٢.٧‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ )‪ ١١٢) (١۶:٩‬ﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢.٧‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ )‪ ،(١۶:٩‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 3
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﺮگ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺟﺪﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ MPEG 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ MPEG4‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ )‪ (SD-VIDEO‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ )‪ VP-DX100(i)/DX100H/DX102/DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ “‪ ”i‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ “ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ” ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i) .‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮﭼﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫)‪ DX105(i‬ﻭ‪ VP-DX100(i)/DX100H/DX102/DX103(i)/DX104‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺪﻝ ) ‪ VP-DX105( i‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ )‪ (LCD‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻲ ﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‬‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫‬‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 7
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ‬‫ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪٠۶‬‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪٠٩‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪١١‬‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫‪١۴‬‬ ‫‪١۵‬‬ ‫‪١۶‬‬ ‫‪٢١‬‬ ‫‪٢٢‬‬ ‫‪٢۶‬‬ ‫‪٢۶‬‬ ‫‪٢٧‬‬ ‫‪٢٧‬‬ ‫‪٢٨‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ))‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ) (‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ
PAGE 9
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫‪٣٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫‪٣٣‬‬ ‫‪٣۵‬‬ ‫‪٣۶‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﻳﺎﻥ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪(EASY.
PAGE 10
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪۶٢‬‬ ‫‪۶٣‬‬ ‫‪۶۵‬‬ ‫‪٧٨‬‬ ‫‪٧٨‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫)) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪٨٣‬‬ ‫‪٨۴‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪٨۶‬‬ ‫‪٨٨‬‬ ‫‪٨٩‬‬ ‫‪٩٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪DVD/HDD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ )ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ( ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮ
PAGE 11
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫‪٩٩‬‬ ‫‪١٠٠‬‬ ‫‪١٠٣‬‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫‪١٠۴‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ‬ ‫‪١١٣‬‬ ‫‪٠۵_Farsi‬‬ ‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:11‬‬ ‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.
PAGE 12
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :١‬ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٨‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٢٩ ,٢٨‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ( )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‬‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .
PAGE 13
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :٢‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪۵۶ ,٣٧~٣٣‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٣٧ ٣٣‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٧‬‬ ‫��‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ :٣‬ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ /‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۵٩~۵٨ ,٣٨‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٩٧ ,٩٠~٨۶‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ )ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۴۶~۴٠‬‬ ‫
PAGE 14
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DVD-R‬‬ ‫‪DVD +R‬‬ ‫‪DL‬‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪DVD -RW‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO‬‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪VR‬‬ ‫‪DVD +RW‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫‪ VR‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫✪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫��‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ )) ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ )) ‪ VP-DX102/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻼﺏ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬ ‫‪١٠_Farsi‬‬ ‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:18‬‬ ‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.
PAGE 17
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪EASY Q‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪FINALIZE‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ )ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ(‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )‪(DISC/CARD‬‬ ‫)) ‪ (VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ )ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪/‬ﭼﭗ‪/‬ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪(W/T ،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﭘﻴﭻ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﺎﻑ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )) ‪ (VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪١١_Farsi‬‬ ‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:19‬‬ ‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.
PAGE 18
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ )‪/(W/T‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) PHOTO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ / MODE‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ) (‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ ) ((‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪ACCESS/CHG‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪OPEN‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ ‪AV‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪ /‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪AV‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ ‪DC IN‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪POWER‬‬ ‫‪١٢_Farsi‬‬ ‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:21‬‬ ‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.
PAGE 19
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ(‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪﻚ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪) BATT .‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ )‪ (+‬ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺷﺴﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ،PHOTO‬ﻭ ﺍﻫﺮﻡﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 23
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬ ‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﻭ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ١٠۴‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪POWER‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ‪ IA-BP٨٠W‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١۶‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ DC IN/USB/AV‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ DC IN‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬ ‫‪ DVD‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ(‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ‪ ۵٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫‪ ۶٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫‪ ۶۵‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﻋﺎﻟﻲ” ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ” ﻳﺎ “ﻋﺎﺩﻱ” ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .
PAGE 26
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬ ‫‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٨‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 27
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫��‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‪ MODE‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻳﺎ ‪ CARD‬ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i)) .
PAGE 28
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫]‪0:00:00 [30 min‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪1/50‬‬ ‫‪1/25‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪01/01/2008 00:00‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﺮﻓﺎً ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ * ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ‪ ٨‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪0:00:59‬‬ ‫‪In‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ VP-DX100i/DX103i/DX105i ) AV‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪001‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ )ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﻜﺚ(‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )ﺩﻳﺴﻚ(‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ )ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ(‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ )‪/-RW Video‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪(VR‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪01/01/2008 00:00‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪٢٣_Farsi‬‬ ‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:41:45‬‬ ‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_
PAGE 30
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫]‪0:00:00 [64 min‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪4830‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪01/01/2008 00:00‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ )ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ )ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ( ﻳﺎ ●)ﺿﺒﻂ((‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ )ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ*‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ*‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ(‬ ‫‪0:00:03‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪Activate‬‬ ‫‪Remote‬‬ ‫‪Control‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪01/01/2008 00:00‬‬ ‫‪100-0002‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ )ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﻜﺚ(‬ ‫ﻛﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ(‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ )ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ(‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪-‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ(‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )ﻋﻜﺲ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮ
PAGE 32
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪) OSD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٧٩‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )‪ (OSD‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 35
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪/‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ” ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ )ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 37
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺰﺍﺣﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ OPEN‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ (VP-DX102/DX104/DX105(i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ‪ LCD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 40
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ٧٢٠X۵٧۶‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﻴﻬﻮﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺪﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﻳﺎﻥ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪(EASY.Q‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﺁﺳﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EASY Q‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ PHOTO‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 43
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ( ﻳﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ )ﺩﻭﺭ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻤﻨﺪ ‪ ٣۴x‬ﻭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪١٢٠٠x‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ )‪ (W/T‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ‪) T‬ﺗﻠﻪ( ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﻭ ‪ ١٩‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0:00:59‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫‪012‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ /‬ﻣﻜﺚ ‪ /‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺚ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﻱ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ” ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫)‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫)‬ ‫((‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬ ‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (VR‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ DVD-RW ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ VR‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ) ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ) ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ) ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ “ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ” ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ” ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﻱ ‪ DVD-RW/-R/+R DL‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 54
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪،‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ ٣ ١/٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ )‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﻱ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ’‪ ‘Windows Media Player‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬ ‫) )‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ VR‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Video‬ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 56
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ :DVD‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i)) .
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫) )‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ DISC‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i)) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 58
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﺎﻑ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪) SD‬ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﻭ ‪MMC‬‬ ‫)ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﺎﻑ ﺟﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪SD‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SD‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SD‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) MMC‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ(‬ ‫>‪
PAGE 60
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫• ‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪ ١٢٨‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ ٢۵۶‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١۶‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫‪ ۵١٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ۶۴‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ ١٢٨‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٢۵۶‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ ۵١٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪۶٠٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪١٢٠٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪٢۴٠٠
PAGE 62
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ‪ LCD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 63
‫ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ VP-DX104/DX105( i )) ١٣‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫]‪0:00:00 [64 min‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪4830‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .
PAGE 64
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ VP-DX104/DX105( i )) ١٣‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫• ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٩‬‬ ‫( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﻜﺲ )‬ ‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 67
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MODE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ »ﭘﺨﺶ« ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬ ‫✪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪MENU‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٠‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ” ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫‪DISC‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭼﺎپ)‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ )ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻜﻲ(‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪CARD‬‬ ‫))‪ VP-DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪۴٠,۶١‬‬ ‫‪۴١,۴۶‬‬ ‫‪۶٠‬‬ ‫‪٧٨‬‬ ‫‪٨٣‬‬ ‫‪۵٩‬‬ ‫‪ : ‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ : X ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣ
PAGE 71
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )‪(AE‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻲ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺣﻞ‪/‬ﺑﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﮕﺴﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪ WB‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ )ﻛﻠﻮﺯﺁپ( ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 73
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ )ﻧﻮﺭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﺷﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ “ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ”)‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (٧۶‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ )ﺿﺪ ﻧﻮﺭ( ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺏ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ “ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )‪ ”(AE‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.
PAGE 75
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺧﻼﻕ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ١٠ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ(‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪،DVD‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 77
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ “ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ” ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﻢ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ “ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )‪ ”(AE‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ EASY.Q‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ “ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪ ١/١٠٠٠‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﺪ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ “ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ” ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺭﻭﺷﻦ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫‪1/25‬‬ ‫‪1/13‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﻓﻴﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ “ﻓﻴﺪﺭ” ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺭﻭﺷﻦ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪) ٣۴x‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ( ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣۴x‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ ١٢٠٠x‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ “ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ”‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‬‫‪-‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ) ) ‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫( ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫“ﺁﺑﻲ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺷﺐ” ‪“ ‬ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻋﺸﻖ” ‪“ ‬ﺑﻨﻔﺶ ﺍﺳﺮﺍﺭﺁﻣﻴﺰ” ‪“  ”Sunny Orange“ ‬ﺳﺒﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﻪ”‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫)) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DPOF‬ﻳﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ‪ ، PictBridge‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ ‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎ ‪) DPOF‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭼﺎپ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 90
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫)) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ‪PICTBRIDGE‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ DPOF‬ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ “‪ ”PictBridge‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٩‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻬﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ” ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ DPOF‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 92
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ PAL‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٠٣‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 93
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫))‪ VP-DX102/DX104/DX105(i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﻧﻮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﺶ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ )‪ (Audio L‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪DVD/HDD‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD/HDD‬ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ »ﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻼﺱ« ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣٨‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ AV‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ AV‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ )ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ( ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫)‪ VP-DX100i/DX103i/DX105i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ( ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ AV‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‪/‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ‪”AV‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ “ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 97
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i ) /DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫✪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫‪DV Media PRO‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ DV Media PRO‬ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،٣٢bit)، XP ۶۴bit)Windows Vista‬ﻳﺎ ‪٢٠٠٠‬‬ ‫* ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i ) /DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ‪DV Media PRO‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ DV Media PRO‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪Video Codec ,DV Driver, DirectX٩.٠ :‬‬ ‫‬‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ‪Video Codec ,DV Driver, DirectX٩.٠ : USB‬‬ ‫‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ!‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 99
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ‪Quick Time -‬‬ ‫‪ ”Quick Time“ .١‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ QuickTime‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ‪ Apple‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ ‪ ٣۶٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫)‪ (VR‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Photo Express‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i ) /DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ”USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٨١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ‪/‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ‬ ‫‪ ،USB‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪ CARD‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٣٠ ,٢١‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ DVD) .‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 102
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i ) /DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫• ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪) DCF‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﻜﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ DPOF‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻭﺍﻝ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ »ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ« ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٩۶~٩۵‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ) ) ‪ VP-DX103( i ) /DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DV Driver, Video Codec‬ﻭ ‪ ٩٫٠ DirectX‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﻬﺪ ﮔﺎﺭﺍﻧﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٨ ،١۶‬‬ ‫‬‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 106
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ )ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺁﻟﻮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺶ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‬‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‬‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ LCD‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ١‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٣١‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪٣٧~٣٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۴٠‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪۴‬‬ ‫)ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ‪( ۵‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۴٨‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۴٨‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ )ﻏﻴﺮﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﻱ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۴٩‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۴۶-۴٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪) ٧‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ( ‪‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۵٠‬‬ ‫‪DVD-R‬‬ ‫)‪( ˝٢/١٣‬‬ ‫‪DVD+R DL‬‬ ‫)‪( ˝٢/١٣‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪ ١.
PAGE 109
‫‪۵‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻏﻴﺮﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻱ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ!‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫“ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ...‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪”.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )) ‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﺎﻑ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫‪ VP-DX103( i )/DX104/DX105( i )) PictBridge‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺮﻳﺞ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺮﻳﺞ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺮﻳﺞ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 113
‫✪‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻧﻜﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬ ‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺗﻌﺮﻕ(‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١٠۶‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻧﺎﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۴٨-۴٧‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 115
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ “ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ” ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ “ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ” ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﻨﺰ ﮔﺮﺩﻭﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣﭗ ﺳﺪﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ )ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ(‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻮﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺪﺍ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ‪ -‬ﭼﭗ(‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ (AV‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .
PAGE 118
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ )ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ( ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪١۴‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‪/‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻝ‪VP-DX100(i)/DX100H/DX102/DX103(i)/DX104/DX105(i) :‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪/LCD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ ٨.۴‬ﻭﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻢ ‪ ٧.۴‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ )‪ ١٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢۴٠‬ﻭﻟﺖ( ‪ ۶٠/۵٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻨﻴﺮﻭ )ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫‪ ۴.
PAGE 120
‫ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺑﺎ‬ .‫ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬SAMSUNG ‫ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ‬،‫ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ‬ Web Site www.samsung.com/ca www.samsung.com www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/ar www.samsung.com www.samsung.com/cl www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com/latin www.samsung.com.co www.
PAGE 121
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ‪RoHS‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻛﺪﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻡ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۶‬ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺩﻣﻴﻢ )‪ (Cd‬ﺳﺮﺏ )‪ ،(Pb‬ﺟﻴﻮﻩ )‪ ،(Pb‬ﻛﺮﻡ ﻫﮕﺰﺍﻭﺍﻭﺍﻻﻥ‬ ‫)‪ ،(۶+Cr‬ﺑﻲ ﻓﻨﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻣﻴﻨﻪ )‪ PBB‬ﻫﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻱ ﻓﻨﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫)‪ PBDE‬ﻫﺎ( ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2008-03-10 ¿ÀÈÄ 3:44:27‬‬ ‫‪Code No. AD68-02550M-00‬‬ ‫‪(AD68-02550M)VP-DX100_IRAN_IB.